blob: e781f99bc92c77d48e11e9bab30366a2cbead22b [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2021 Jul 02
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar4072ba52020-12-23 13:56:35 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings.
70This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
Bram Moolenaar53f7fcc2021-07-28 20:10:16 +0200926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001084The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1085*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1086value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1087identifiers:
1088>
1089 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1090 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1091 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1092 \ }
1093<
1094Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1095
1096If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1097language constants and special forms are matched.
1098
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001099Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1100Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1101using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1102
1103Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1104bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1105
1106This option is off by default.
1107>
1108 " Default
1109 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1110<
1111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001112COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001113
1114COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1115development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1116versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1117add this line to your .vimrc: >
1118 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1119To disable it again, use this: >
1120 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1121
1122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001123COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001125The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001126comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1127
1128 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1129
1130The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001133CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1134
1135Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1136
1137Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001138cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001139cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001140
1141
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001142CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001143
1144This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1145used.
1146
1147Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1148symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1149between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001150"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1151>
1152 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001153
1154For using tcsh: >
1155
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001156 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001157
1158Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1159tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001160will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001161"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1162variable.
1163
1164
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001165CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001166
1167Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001168hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001170normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001171line to your .vimrc file: >
1172
1173 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1174
1175Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1176
1177 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1178
1179To disable these again, use this: >
1180
1181 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1182 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1183<
1184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001185CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001186
1187Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1188doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1189startup vimrc: >
1190 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1191
1192
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001193DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1194
1195Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1196used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1197a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1198from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1199
1200More information about the language and its development environment at the
1201official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1202
1203dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1204type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1205and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1206framework.
1207
1208Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1209
1210https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1211
1212
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001213DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001214
1215Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001216according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001217https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1218To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1219 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1220Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1221To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1222 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1223g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001224
1225
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001226DIFF *diff.vim*
1227
1228The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1229there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1230
1231 :let diff_translations = 0
1232
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001233Also see |diff-slow|.
1234
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001235
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001236DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001237
1238The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1239provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1240the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1241versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1242uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1243line to your startup file: >
1244 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1245
1246
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001247DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001248DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1249DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001250
1251There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1252are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1253automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1254defaults to XML.
1255You can set the type manually: >
1256 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1257or: >
1258 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1259You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1260Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1261 :set filetype=docbksgml
1262or: >
1263 :set filetype=docbkxml
1264
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001265You can specify the DocBook version: >
1266 :let docbk_ver = 3
1267When not set 4 is used.
1268
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001269
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001270DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001271
1272There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1273extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1274is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1275this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1276Select the version you want with the following line: >
1277
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001278 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001279
1280If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1281Windows 2000.
1282
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001283A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001284"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1285is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001286
1287 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1288
1289If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1290
1291
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001292DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1293
1294Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001295(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1296idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001297
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001298There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1299explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1300Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001301 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1302or >
1303 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1304
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001305It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1306the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1307adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001308 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1309
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001310There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001311are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1312
1313Variable Default Effect ~
1314g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1315g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1316 doxygen comments.
1317
1318doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1319 and html_my_rendering underline.
1320
1321doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1322 colour highlighting.
1323
1324doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001325 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001326
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001327There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001328configuration.
1329
1330Highlight Effect ~
1331doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1332 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1333doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1334 \endlink from a \link section.
1335
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001336
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001337DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001338
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001339The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001340case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1341
1342 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1343
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001344The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001345this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1346
1347 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1348
1349before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1350Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1351'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1352Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1353highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001354delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001355
1356 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1357
1358The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1359
1360
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001361EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001362
1363While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001364syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1365highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001366highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1367
1368 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1369
1370Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1371
1372Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1373
1374 :let eiffel_strict=1
1375 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1376
1377Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1378five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1379"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1380
1381Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1382guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1383lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1384
1385If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1386"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1387
1388 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1389
1390instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1391
1392Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1393experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1394
1395 :let eiffel_ise=1
1396
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001397Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001398
1399 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1400
1401to your startup file.
1402
1403
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001404EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1405
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001406Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001407version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001408Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1409
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001410Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1411for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001412(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1413
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001414The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1415
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001416 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1417 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1418
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001419To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001420auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1421add the following line to your startup file: >
1422
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001423 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3"
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001424
Bram Moolenaar4d8f4762021-06-27 15:18:56 +02001425< or >
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001426
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001427 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4"
1428
1429Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1430specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1431file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1432filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1433Elixir.
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001434
1435
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001436ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001437
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001438Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001439the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001440
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001441The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1442put the following line in your vimrc: >
1443
1444 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1445
1446To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1447
1448 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001449
1450
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001451ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax*
1452
1453Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and maintainable
1454applications.
1455
1456The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types:
1457
1458 *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock
1459
1460Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1461specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1462file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1463filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1464Elixir.
1465
1466
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001467FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1468
1469FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001470NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1471development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001472
1473Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1474syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1475editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1476start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1477'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1478(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1479and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1480
1481If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1482move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1483 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1484
1485
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001486FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001487
1488The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1489modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001490following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001491J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1492
1493If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1494redefine the following syntax groups:
1495
1496 - formConditional
1497 - formNumber
1498 - formStatement
1499 - formHeaderStatement
1500 - formComment
1501 - formPreProc
1502 - formDirective
1503 - formType
1504 - formString
1505
1506Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1507directives per default in the same syntax group.
1508
1509A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001510header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001511this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1512
1513 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1514
1515The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001516gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001517conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1518
1519
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001520FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001521
1522Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001523Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001524should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1525almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001526
1527Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001528Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001529syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1530
1531When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001532form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001533 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001534in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001535form, then >
1536 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1537in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1538
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001539If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1540extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1541file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1542will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1543on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001544
1545When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1546source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001547fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001548neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001549determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1550using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1551compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1552free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1553columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1554are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1555algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1556file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1557incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1558just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001559of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560
1561Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001562Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001563fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001564Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1565using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001566variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1567 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001568placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001569mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1570
1571Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1572If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1573fortran_fold with a command such as >
1574 :let fortran_fold=1
1575to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1576is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001577subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001578also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1579 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1580then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001581case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001582fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1583 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1584then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001585lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001586
1587If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1588fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001589you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001590units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1591unit.
1592
1593More precise fortran syntax ~
1594If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1595 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001596then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001597statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1598recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1599construct.
1600
1601Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001602The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1603find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1604deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1605items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001606
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001607If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1608other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001609that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001610
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001611The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1612the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1613to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1614fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1615ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001616
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001617If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1618set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1619ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1620an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1621contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001622 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1623 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001624 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001625 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001626 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001627 endif
1628Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1629precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1630
1631Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001632the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1633by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1634f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1635files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1636identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1637Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001638 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001639
1640For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1641now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1642silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001643instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001644
1645The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1646comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1647non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1648or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001649items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001650
1651Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001652Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1653strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001654because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1655
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001656For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1657|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001658
1659
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001660FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001661
1662In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1663the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1664appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1665patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1666number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1667
1668For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1669as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1670
1671 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1672 \ set filetype=fvwm
1673
1674If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1675find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1676"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1677in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1678
1679 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1680
1681to your .vimrc file.
1682
1683
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001684GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001685
1686The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1687the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1688is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1689are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1690
1691 htmlString
1692 htmlValue
1693 htmlEndTag
1694 htmlTag
1695 htmlTagN
1696
1697Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1698java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1699group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1700correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1701to the contains clause.
1702
1703The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1704group to make them easier to see.
1705
1706
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001707GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001708
1709The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001710under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001711of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1712filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1713(see |filetype.txt|).
1714
1715
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001716HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001717
1718The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001719Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001720syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1721
1722If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1723light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1724 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1725To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1726add: >
1727 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1728To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1729 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1730And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1731 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1732If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1733your .vimrc: >
1734 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1735
1736The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1737directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001738directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1739operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001740as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1741 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1742
1743The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1744automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1745TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001746or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001747in your .vimrc >
1748 :let lhs_markup = none
1749for no highlighting at all, or >
1750 :let lhs_markup = tex
1751to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1752For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1753this variable, so e.g. >
1754 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001755will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001756set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1757loading a file.
1758
1759
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001760HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001761
1762The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1763
1764The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1765This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001766closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those
1767are defined for you)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001768
1769Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1770names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1771makes it easy to spot errors
1772
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001773Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001774names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1775
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001776Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001777are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1778text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1779while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001780only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001781<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001782
1783If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1784following syntax groups:
1785
1786 - htmlBold
1787 - htmlBoldUnderline
1788 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1789 - htmlUnderline
1790 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1791 - htmlItalic
1792 - htmlTitle for titles
1793 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1794
1795To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1796of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1797following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1798are read during initialization) >
1799 :let html_my_rendering=1
1800
1801If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1802http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1803
1804You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1805vimrc file: >
1806 :let html_no_rendering=1
1807
1808HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1809details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1810However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001811ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001812 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1813
1814JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1815'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001816programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001817supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1818
1819Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1820
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001821There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1822written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001823following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1824(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001825>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001826 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1827 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1828
1829Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1830the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1831
1832
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001833HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001834
1835The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1836
1837Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1838doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1839this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1840different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1841 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1842
1843Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1844
1845Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1846signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1847a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1848 :set syntax=htmlos
1849
1850Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1851block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1852
1853
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001854IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001855
1856Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1857how to recognize this filetype.
1858
1859To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1860 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1861
1862
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001863INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001864
1865Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1866most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1867to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1868 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1869
1870By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1871and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1872you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1873need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1874 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1875
1876This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1877set of highlighted system functions.
1878
1879The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1880it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1881by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1882startup sequence: >
1883 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1884
1885By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1886version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1887Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1888startup sequence: >
1889 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1890
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001891IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1892
1893IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1894Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1895
1896IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1897rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001898repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001899
1900There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1901are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1902
1903The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1904
1905Variable Effect ~
1906
1907idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1908 extensions
1909idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1910idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1911 quite helpful)
1912idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1913
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001914
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001915JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001916
1917The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1918
1919In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1920flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001921classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001922way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1923 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1924
1925All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1926highlight them use: >
1927 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1928
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001929You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001930download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1931If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1932use the following: >
1933 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1934Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1935
1936Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001937how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001938functions:
1939
1940If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1941a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1942 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1943However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1944supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1945 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1946If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1947declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1948definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1949original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1950
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001951In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001952only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001953statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001954your startup file: >
1955 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1956The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001957characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001958new highlightings for the following groups.:
1959 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1960which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001961strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001962have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001963
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001964Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1965creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1966similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1967and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001968 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1969 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1970 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1971 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1972 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001973 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001974 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1975To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1976 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1977
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001978If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1979can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1980scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1981actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1982CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001983 :let java_javascript=1
1984 :let java_css=1
1985 :let java_vb=1
1986
1987In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1988for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1989 :hi link javaParen Comment
1990or >
1991 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1992
1993If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1994when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1995to a larger number: >
1996 :let java_minlines = 50
1997This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1998displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1999number is that redrawing can become slow.
2000
2001
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02002002JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
2003
2004The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
2005default. To disable concealment: >
2006 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
2007
2008To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
2009 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
2010
2011
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002012LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002013
2014Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
2015style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
2016define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
2017 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
2018
2019
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002020LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002021
2022Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2023gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2024 :syn sync minlines=300
2025may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2026difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2027
2028
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002029LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2030
2031To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2032
2033 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2034<
2035
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002036LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2037
2038The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2039
2040 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2041 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2042 Useful for AutoLisp.
2043 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2044 of parenthesization will receive different
2045 highlighting.
2046<
2047The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2048the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2049colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2050specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002051usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002052highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2053
2054
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002055LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002056
2057There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2058
2059If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2060
2061 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2062
2063For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2064set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2065
2066 :let lite_minlines = 200
2067
2068
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002069LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002070
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002071LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002072file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2073users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2074should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2075
2076 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2077
2078If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2079modeline. For a LPC file:
2080
2081 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2082
2083For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2084
2085 // vim:set ft=c:
2086
2087If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2088
2089There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002090used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002091and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002092assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002093you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2094
2095 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2096
2097For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2098
2099 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2100
2101For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2102
2103 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2104
2105For uLPC series of LPC:
2106uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2107instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2108
2109
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002110LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002111
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002112The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002113the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2114lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010021155.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002116
2117 :let lua_version = 5
2118 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002119
2120
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002121MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002122
2123Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002124quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002125signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2126whitespaces and end with a newline.
2127
2128Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002129as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002130only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2131
2132By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002133displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002134with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2135
2136 :let mail_minlines = 30
2137
2138
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002139MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002140
2141In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2142errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2143feature off by using: >
2144
2145 :let make_no_commands = 1
2146
2147
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002148MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002149
2150Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2151supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2152The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2153highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2154
2155 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2156
2157to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2158choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21591, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2160$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2161
2162 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2163 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2164 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2165 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2166 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2167 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2168 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2169 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2170 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2171
2172
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002173MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002174
2175Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2176have the following in your .vimrc: >
2177
2178 let filetype_m = "mma"
2179
2180
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002181MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002182
2183If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2184highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2185comments: >
2186
2187 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2188
2189To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2190
2191 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2192
2193To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2194'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2195
2196 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2197
2198Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2199
2200 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2201
2202To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2203
2204 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2205
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002206Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002207use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2208To enable this option: >
2209
2210 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2211
2212An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2213
2214 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2215
2216
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002217MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002218
2219There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2220
2221If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2222
2223 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2224
2225For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2226set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2227
2228 :let msql_minlines = 200
2229
2230
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002231N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2232
2233N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2234Couchbase Server databases.
2235
2236Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2237and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2238many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2239
2240
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002241NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002242
2243There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2244
2245If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2246errors, use this: >
2247
2248 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2249
2250If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2251
2252
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002253NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002254
2255The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2256activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2257can use them.
2258
2259For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002260processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002261features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see
2262|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002263
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002264 :let nroff_is_groff = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002265
2266Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2267Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2268there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002269you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002270can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2271native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2272\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2273accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2274environments.
2275
2276In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2277follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2278
22791. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2280
22812. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2282 exclamation mark, etc.
2283
22843. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2285 carriage return.
2286
2287The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2288algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2289
2290Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2291furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2292vertical space input will be output as is.
2293
2294Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2295than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2296practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002297marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002298need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002299spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2300
2301 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2302
2303Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2304with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2305highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002306"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002307
2308 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2309 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2310 \ gui=reverse,bold
2311
2312If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2313with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2314file: >
2315
2316 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2317
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002318As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002319paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2320
2321Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2322groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2323
2324
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002325OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002326
2327The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2328.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2329
2330 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2331
2332you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2333by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2334
2335 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2336
2337prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2338contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2339
2340
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002341PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002342
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002343The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002344and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002345as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2346sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002347you set the variable: >
2348
2349 :let papp_include_html=1
2350
2351in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2352sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002353edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002354
2355The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2356http://papp.plan9.de.
2357
2358
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002359PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002360
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002361Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp"
2362could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you,
2363or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002364
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002365 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2366 :let filetype_pp = "pascal"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002367
2368The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2369provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002370Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002371enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2372following line to your startup file: >
2373
2374 :let pascal_traditional=1
2375
2376To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2377keywords, etc): >
2378
2379 :let pascal_delphi=1
2380
2381
2382The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2383*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2384operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2385
2386 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2387
2388Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2389
2390 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2391
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002392Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002393pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2394match Turbo Pascal. >
2395
2396 :let pascal_gpc=1
2397
2398or >
2399
2400 :let pascal_fpc=1
2401
2402To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2403pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2404
2405 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2406
2407If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2408will be highlighted as Error. >
2409
2410 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2411
2412
2413
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002414PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002415
2416There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2417
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002418Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2419to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2420files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002421
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002422 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002423
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002424To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002425off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002426
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002427To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2428from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002429
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002430 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002431
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002432(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2433enabled it.)
2434
2435If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2436
2437 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2438
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002439(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002440
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002441The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2442highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002443perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2444
2445 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2446 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2447 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2448
2449(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2450
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002451The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002452synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2453If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002454then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002455out the line that causes the mistake.
2456
2457One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2458
2459 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2460 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2461
2462Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2463its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2464
2465 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2466
2467If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2468
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002469 :let perl_fold = 1
2470
2471If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2472
2473 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002474
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002475Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2476this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002477
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002478 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002479
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002480Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2481via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002482
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002483 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2484
2485Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2486behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2487
2488 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002489
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002490PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002491
2492[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2493it has been renamed to "php"]
2494
2495There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2496
2497If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2498
2499 let php_sql_query = 1
2500
2501For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2502
2503 let php_baselib = 1
2504
2505Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2506
2507 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2508
2509Using the old colorstyle: >
2510
2511 let php_oldStyle = 1
2512
2513Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2514
2515 let php_asp_tags = 1
2516
2517Disable short tags: >
2518
2519 let php_noShortTags = 1
2520
2521For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2522
2523 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2524
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002525For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002526one: >
2527
2528 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2529
2530Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2531
2532 let php_folding = 1
2533
2534Selecting syncing method: >
2535
2536 let php_sync_method = x
2537
2538x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2539x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2540x = 0 to sync from start.
2541
2542
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002543PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2544
2545TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2546variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002547see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002548
2549This syntax file has the option >
2550
2551 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2552
2553if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2554
2555
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002556PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002557
2558PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2559
2560This syntax file has the options:
2561
2562- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002563 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002564
2565 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002566 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002567
2568 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2569 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2570 continuation symbols
2571
2572 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2573
2574- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2575 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2576
2577
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002578PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002579
2580There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2581
2582If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2583
2584 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2585
2586For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2587set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2588
2589 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2590
2591
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002592POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002593
2594There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2595
2596First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2597currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2598and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2599Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2600extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2601level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2602highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2603
2604 :let postscr_level=2
2605
2606If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2607the most prevalent version currently.
2608
2609Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2610particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2611PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2612
2613If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2614Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2615follows: >
2616
2617 :let postscr_display=1
2618
2619If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2620Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2621postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2622
2623 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2624
2625PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2626useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2627cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2628character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2629explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2630highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2631
2632 :let postscr_fonts=1
2633 :let postscr_encodings=1
2634
2635There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2636PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2637operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2638if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2639operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2640or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2641highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2642postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2643
2644 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2645<
2646
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002647 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2648PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002649
2650This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2651
2652In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2653the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2654appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2655patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2656"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2657
2658For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2659files, add the following: >
2660
2661 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2662 \ set filetype=ptcap
2663
2664If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2665are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2666internal variable to a larger number: >
2667
2668 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2669
2670(The default is 20 lines.)
2671
2672
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002673PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002674
2675Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2676doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2677startup vimrc: >
2678 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2679The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2680Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2681 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2682 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2683
2684
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002685PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002686
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002687There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002688
2689For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002690 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002691
2692For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002693 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002694
2695For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002696 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2697
2698For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2699 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2700or >
2701 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2702(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002703
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002704For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002705 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002706
2707If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002708preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002709 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2710
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002711Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002712 1 above with anything.
2713
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002714QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002715
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002716The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2717based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2718between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2719definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2720to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2721be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002722
2723set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2724 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2725
2726set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2727 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2728
2729set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2730 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2731
2732Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2733commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2734
2735
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002736R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2737
2738The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2739can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2740 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2741
2742You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2743 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2744
2745enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2746braces: >
2747 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2748
2749and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2750 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2751
2752
2753R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2754
2755To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2756 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2757
2758To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2759 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2760
2761To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2762 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2763
2764By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2765language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2766you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2767`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2768you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2769 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2770
2771
2772R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2773
2774To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2775 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2776
2777
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002778READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002779
2780The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002781few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002782items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2783command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2784 let readline_has_bash = 1
2785
2786This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2787later, and part earlier) adds.
2788
2789
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002790REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2791
2792Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2793language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2794the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2795
2796
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002797RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2798
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002799Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2800select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2801syntax list.
2802
2803To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002804 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002805
2806To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2807`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2808 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002809 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2810 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002811 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002812 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002813
2814To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2815 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2816
2817To enable folding of sections: >
2818 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2819
2820Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2821
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002822
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002823REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002824
2825If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2826when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2827to a larger number: >
2828 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2829This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2830displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2831number is that redrawing can become slow.
2832
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002833Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2834comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2835your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2836>
2837 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2838
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002839
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002840RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002841
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002842 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2843 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2844 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2845 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2846 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2847
2848 *ruby_operators*
2849 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2850
2851Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2852
2853 :let ruby_operators = 1
2854<
2855 *ruby_space_errors*
2856 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2857
2858Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2859
2860 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2861<
2862This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2863as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2864"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2865spaces respectively.
2866
2867 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2868 Ruby: Folding ~
2869
2870Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2871
2872 :let ruby_fold = 1
2873<
2874This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2875buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2876filetypes.
2877
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002878Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2879"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2880
2881You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2882
2883 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2884<
2885The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2886
2887 keyword meaning ~
2888 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2889 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2890 NONE Nothing
2891 if "if" or "unless" block
2892 def "def" block
2893 class "class" block
2894 module "module" block
2895 do "do" block
2896 begin "begin" block
2897 case "case" block
2898 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2899 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2900 [ Array literal
2901 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2902 / Regexp
2903 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2904 : Symbol
2905 # Multiline comment
2906 << Here documents
2907 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2908
2909 *ruby_no_expensive*
2910 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911
2912By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002913of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002914experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2915you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002916
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002917 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002918<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002919In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2920
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002921 *ruby_minlines*
2922
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002923If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2924scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2925the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002926
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002927 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002928<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002929Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2930largest class or module.
2931
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002932 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2933 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002934
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002935Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2936"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002937
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002938 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002939<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002940
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002941SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002942
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002943By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002944
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002945scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2946Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002947
2948
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002949SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002950
2951The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2952of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2953
2954The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2955case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002956used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002957highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2958 :let sdl_2000=1
2959
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002960This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002961keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2962 :let SDL_no_96=1
2963
2964
2965The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2966satisfied with it for my own projects.
2967
2968
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002969SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002970
2971To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2972highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2973
2974 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2975
2976in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2977inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2978by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2979also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2980you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2981
2982Bugs:
2983
2984 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2985 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2986 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2987 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2988 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2989 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2990
2991
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002992SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002993
2994The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2995
2996The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2997This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2998closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2999defined for you)
3000
3001Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
3002names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
3003
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003004Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003005names are colored differently than unknown ones.
3006
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003007Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003008are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
3009text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
3010<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
3011
3012If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
3013following syntax groups:
3014
3015 - sgmlBold
3016 - sgmlBoldItalic
3017 - sgmlUnderline
3018 - sgmlItalic
3019 - sgmlLink for links
3020
3021To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
3022following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
3023are read during initialization) >
3024 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3025
3026You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3027vimrc file: >
3028 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3029
3030(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3031
3032
Bram Moolenaar4466ad62020-11-21 13:16:30 +01003033 *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax*
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003034SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003035
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003036This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3037shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003038
3039Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003040various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003041
3042 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3043 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3044<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003045See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3046cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3047/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3048that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3049shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3050symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003051
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003052One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003053variables in your <.vimrc>:
3054
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003055 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003056 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003057< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003058 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003059< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003060 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003061< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003062 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003063
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003064< (dash users should use posix)
3065
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003066If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3067default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003068the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3069statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003070sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003071
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003072The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3073
3074 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3075 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3076 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3077 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003078>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003079then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003080syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3081to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003082
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003083 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3084
3085If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3086when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003087to a larger number. Example: >
3088
3089 let sh_minlines = 500
3090
3091This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3092displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3093number is that redrawing can become slow.
3094
3095If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3096reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3097
3098 let sh_maxlines = 100
3099<
3100The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3101speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3102
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003103syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3104extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3105for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3106the following line in your .vimrc: >
3107
3108 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3109<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003110
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003111 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3112 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003113
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003114You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3115Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3116file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3117
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003118 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003119 " ==============
3120 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3121 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3122 unlet b:current_syntax
3123 endif
3124 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3125 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3126 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3127 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3128 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3129<
3130This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3131 awk '...awk code here...'
3132be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3133extended to other languages.
3134
3135
3136SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3137(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003138
3139The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3140
3141- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3142 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3143 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3144
3145- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3146 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003147 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003148 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3149 them in the syntax file.
3150
3151- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3152 highlighting of # style comments.
3153
3154 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3155 number of #s.
3156
3157 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003158 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003159
3160 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3161 more than one #.
3162
3163Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003164PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003165fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3166the syntax file.
3167
3168
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003169SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3170 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003171 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003172
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003173While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3174custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3175SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003176
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003177Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3178scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3179supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3180buffer by buffer basis.
3181
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003182For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003183
3184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003185TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003186
3187This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3188for how the filetype is detected.
3189
3190Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003191is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003192this line to your .vimrc: >
3193
3194 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3195
3196If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3197when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3198to a larger number: >
3199
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003200 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003201
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003202This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3203displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3204synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3205tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3206redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003207
3208
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003209TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003210 *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003211
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003212 Tex Contents~
3213 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3214 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3215 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3216 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3217 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3218 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3219 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3220 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3221 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3222 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3223 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3224 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3225 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003226 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003227 Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003228
3229 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003230 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003231
3232As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3233sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3234 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3235in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3236modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3237 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003238If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003239 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003240<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003241 *g:tex_nospell*
3242 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3243
3244If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3245 let g:tex_nospell=1
3246into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3247comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3248
3249 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003250 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003251
3252Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3253prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3254this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3255 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003256If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3257see |g:tex_nospell|.
3258
3259 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003260 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003261
3262Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3263one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3264want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3265 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003266<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003267 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003268 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003269
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003270The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3271highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3272texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3273terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3274as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003275special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3276 %stopzone
3277which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3278texMathZone.
3279
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003280 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003281 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003282
3283If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3284 :syn sync maxlines=200
3285 :syn sync minlines=50
3286(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003287increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003288if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3289
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003290Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3291|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3292
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003293 *g:tex_fast*
3294
3295Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3296
3297 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3298
3299in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3300highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3301synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3302price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3303folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3304
3305You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3306selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3307
3308 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3309 c : allow texComment syntax
3310 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3311 M : allow texMath syntax
3312 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3313 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3314 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3315 S : allow texStyle syntax
3316 v : allow verbatim syntax
3317 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3318<
3319As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3320but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003321(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003322
3323 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003324 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003325
3326LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3327of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3328package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3329it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3330techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003331by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3332which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3333http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003334
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003335I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3336
3337 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3338<
3339The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3340
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003341 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003342 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003343
3344The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3345although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3346errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3347you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003348 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003349and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003350
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003351 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003352 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003353
3354If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3355code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003356 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3357You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3358(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3359As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3360 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3361You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3362and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3363The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3364has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003365
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003366 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003367 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003368
3369One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3370commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3371following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3372such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3373
3374 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3375 :set ft=tex
3376
3377Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3378always accept such use of @.
3379
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003380 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003381 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003382
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003383If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3384number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3385including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3386superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3387superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3388In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3389
3390One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3391with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003392
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003393 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003394 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3395
3396You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003397<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3398for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003399
3400 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003401 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003402 d = delimiters
3403 m = math symbols
3404 g = Greek
3405 s = superscripts/subscripts
3406<
3407By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3408substitution will not be made.
3409
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003410 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3411 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3412
3413Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3414keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3415syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3416
3417 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3418 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3419 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003420 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003421 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3422 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3423 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003424 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003425
3426 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3427 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3428
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003429 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3430 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3431
3432 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3433
3434 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3435 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3436
3437 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3438 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3439 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3440 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3441
3442 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3443 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3444<
3445 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3446 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3447 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3448< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3449 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3450
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003451 *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck*
3452 Tex: Match Check Control~
3453
3454 Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces,
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02003455 and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but
3456 not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003457 with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To
3458 accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides >
3459 g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]'
3460< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't
3461 want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using >
3462 let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]'
3463< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized
3464 regions, >
3465 let g:tex_excludematcher= 1
3466< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003467
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003468TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003469
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003470There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3471
3472For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3473set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3474
3475 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3476<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003477VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3478 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003479There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003480updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3481g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3482improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003483
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003484 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3485 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3486<
3487 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3488 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003489
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003490 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3491The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3492embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003493
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003494 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3495 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003496 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3497 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3498 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3499 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3500 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003501<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003502By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3503itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3504of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3505and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003506 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003507
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003508Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003509
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003510 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3511 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3512 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003513 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003514 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3515 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3516 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3517 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3518 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003519<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003520 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003521Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3522is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003523highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003524
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003525 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3526<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003527
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003528
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003529XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003530
3531The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3532variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3533You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3534xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3535your .vimrc. Example: >
3536 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3537When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3538
3539Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3540"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3541highlighted.
3542
3543
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003544XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003545
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003546Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003547setting a global variable: >
3548
3549 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3550<
3551 *xml-folding*
3552The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003553start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003554
3555 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3556 :set foldmethod=syntax
3557
3558Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3559especially for large files.
3560
3561
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003562X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003563
3564xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3565XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3566you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3567
3568To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3569somewhere else with "P".
3570
3571Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3572 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003573 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003574 : echo c
3575 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3576 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3577 :endfunction
3578 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3579 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3580This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3581It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3582must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3583
3584It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3585 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3586
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003587
3588YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3589
3590 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003591A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3592non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3593plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3594and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3595integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003596will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3597
3598Schema Description ~
3599failsafe No additional highlighting.
3600json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3601core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003602pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3603 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3604 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003605 schema.
3606
3607Default schema is `core`.
3608
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003609Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3610only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003611difference defined in the syntax file.
3612
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003613
3614ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3615
3616The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3617
3618 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3619
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003620==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010036216. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003622
3623Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3624
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036251. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003626 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3627 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3628 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3629 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3630 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3631
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036322. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003633 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3634
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036353. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003636 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3637 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3638 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3639
3640Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3641you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3642to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3643and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3644"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3645one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3646This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3647each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3648for a lot of groups.
3649
3650Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3651group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3652for the syntax group with the same name.
3653
3654In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3655defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3656using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3657match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3658keyword with ignoring case.
3659
3660
3661PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3662
3663When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3664
36651. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3666 defined last has priority.
36672. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36683. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3669 start in later positions.
3670
3671
3672DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3673
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003674:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003675 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3676 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3677 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3678 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3679
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003680:sy[ntax] case
3681 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003682
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003683
3684DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3685
3686:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3687 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3688 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3689
3690 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3691 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3692
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003693 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003694 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3695 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3696 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3697
3698:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3699 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3700
3701 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3702
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003703SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3704
3705:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3706 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3707 in a syntax item:
3708
3709 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3710 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3711 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3712
3713 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3714 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3715 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3716
3717 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3718
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003719:sy[ntax] spell
3720 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3721 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3722
3723
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003724SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3725
3726:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3727 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3728 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3729
3730 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3731 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003732 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003733
3734 Example: >
3735 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3736<
3737 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3738 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3739 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3740
3741 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3742
3743 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003744 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003745 match.
3746
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003747 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3748 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003749 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003750
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003751DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3752
3753:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3754
3755 This defines a number of keywords.
3756
3757 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3758 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3759 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3760
3761 Example: >
3762 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3763<
3764 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3765 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3766 These examples do exactly the same: >
3767 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3768 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3769 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003770< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003771 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3772 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3773 variations at once: >
3774 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3775<
3776 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3777 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3778 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3779 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3780 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003781 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003782
3783 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3784 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3785 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3786
3787 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3788 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3789 instead.
3790
3791 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3792
3793 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3794 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3795 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003796 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003797 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3798 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3799< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3800 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3801 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3802
3803
3804DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3805
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003806:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3807 [excludenl]
3808 [keepend]
3809 {pattern}
3810 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003811
3812 This defines one match.
3813
3814 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3815 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3816 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3817 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3818 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003819 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3820 match with the end pattern. See
3821 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003822 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3823 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3824 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3825 line, which makes the match depend on where
3826 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3827 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3828
3829 Example (match a character constant): >
3830 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3831<
3832
3833DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3834 *E398* *E399*
3835:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3836 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3837 [keepend]
3838 [extend]
3839 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003840 start={start-pattern} ..
3841 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3842 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003843 [{options}]
3844
3845 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3846
3847 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3848 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3849 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3850 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3851 for the text in between the matched start and
3852 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3853 a different group for the start or end match.
3854 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3855 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3856 match with the end pattern. See
3857 |:syn-keepend|.
3858 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003859 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003860 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3861 extend a containing match or item. Only
3862 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3863 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003864 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003865 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003866 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003867 the region where not to look for the end
3868 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003869 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003870 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3871
3872 Example: >
3873 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3874<
3875 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3876 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3877 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3878 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3879 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3880 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3881
3882 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3883 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3884 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3885 the end patterns.
3886
3887 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3888 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3889 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3890
3891 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3892 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3893 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3894 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3895
3896 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3897 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3898 work: >
3899 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3900 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3901< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3902 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3903 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3904 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3905 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3906< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3907 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3908
3909 *:syn-keepend*
3910 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3911 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3912 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3913 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3914 { starts outer "{}" region
3915 { starts contained "{}" region
3916 } ends contained "{}" region
3917 } ends outer "{} region
3918 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3919 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3920 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3921 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3922 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3923 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3924 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3925< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3926 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3927
3928 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3929 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3930 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3931 contained matches.
3932 *:syn-extend*
3933 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3934 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3935 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3936 extended.
3937 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3938 others don't. Example: >
3939
3940 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3941 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3942 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3943
3944< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3945 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3946 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3947
3948 Another example: >
3949 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3950< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3951 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3952 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3953 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3954 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3955
3956 *:syn-excludenl*
3957 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3958 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3959 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3960 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3961 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3962 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3963 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3964 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3965 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3966 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3967 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3968 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3969 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3970
3971 *:syn-matchgroup*
3972 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3973 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3974 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3975< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3976 between with the "String" group.
3977 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3978 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3979 using a matchgroup.
3980
3981 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3982 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3983 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3984 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3985 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3986
3987 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3988 different colors: >
3989 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3990 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3991 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3992 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3993 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3994 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003995<
3996 *E849*
3997The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003998
3999==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010040007. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004001
4002The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
4003The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
4004and may be mixed with patterns.
4005
4006Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
4007can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02004008 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004009 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
4010:syntax keyword - - - - - -
4011:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
4012:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004013
4014These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004015 conceal
4016 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004017 contained
4018 containedin
4019 nextgroup
4020 transparent
4021 skipwhite
4022 skipnl
4023 skipempty
4024
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004025conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
4026
4027When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02004028Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02004029'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
4030concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
4031edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02004032Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004033
4034concealends *:syn-concealends*
4035
4036When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
4037the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
4038Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
4039'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
4040in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
4041
4042cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004043 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004044The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4045when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4046argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004047character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4048a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004049 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004050See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004051
4052contained *:syn-contained*
4053
4054When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4055the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4056another match. Example: >
4057 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4058 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4059
4060
4061display *:syn-display*
4062
4063If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4064detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4065by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4066to be displayed.
4067
4068Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4069conditions:
4070- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4071 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4072 line.
4073- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4074 make it continue on the next line.
4075- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4076 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4077 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4078- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4079 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4080 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4081 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4082
4083Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4084- match with a number
4085- match with a label
4086
4087
4088transparent *:syn-transparent*
4089
4090If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4091itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4092is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4093only to skip over a part of the text.
4094
4095The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4096unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4097avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4098highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4099 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4100 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4101 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4102 :hi link myString String
4103 :hi link myWord Comment
4104Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4105match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4106argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4107it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4108out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004109"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004110happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4111position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4112
4113When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4114items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4115see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4116through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4117
4118 look from here
4119
4120 | | | | | |
4121 V V V V V V
4122
4123 xxxx yyy more contained items
4124 .................... contained item (transparent)
4125 ============================= first item
4126
4127The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4128transparent group.
4129
4130What you see is:
4131
4132 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4133
4134Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4135
4136
4137oneline *:syn-oneline*
4138
4139The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4140boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4141region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4142the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4143continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4144line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4145
4146When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4147pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4148end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4149means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4150be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4151line break.
4152
4153
4154fold *:syn-fold*
4155
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004156The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004157Example: >
4158 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4159 :syn sync fromstart
4160 :set foldmethod=syntax
4161This will make each {} block form one fold.
4162
4163The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4164ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4165The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004166See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4167from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004168{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4169
4170
4171 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004172contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004173
4174The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4175groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4176containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4177regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4178this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4179here.
4180
4181contains=ALL
4182 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4183 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4184
4185contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4186 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4187 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4188 are listed. Example: >
4189 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4190
4191contains=TOP
4192 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4193 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4194 argument.
4195contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4196 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4197
4198contains=CONTAINED
4199 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4200 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4201 argument.
4202contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4203 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4204 listed.
4205
4206
4207The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4208that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4209The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4210 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4211The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4212that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4213command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4214syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4215the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4216group names.
4217
4218The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4219region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4220|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4221region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4222area that is highlighted
4223
4224
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004225containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004226
4227The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4228item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4229containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4230
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004231The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004232
4233This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4234be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4235of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4236the C syntax: >
4237 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4238Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4239level.
4240
4241Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4242appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4243keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4244work.
4245
4246
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004247nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004248
4249The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4250separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4251
4252If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4253tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4254a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4255will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4256current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4257other groups. Example: >
4258 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4259 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4260 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4261
4262This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4263"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4264highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4265
4266 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4267 fff bbb fff bbb
4268
4269Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4270when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4271highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4272would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4273
4274
4275skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4276skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4277skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4278
4279These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4280used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004281 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004282 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4283 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4284
4285When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4286next group that matches the white space.
4287
4288When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4289line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4290line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4291the current item in the same line.
4292
4293When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4294groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4295for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4296space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4297
4298Example: >
4299 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4300 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4301 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4302Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4303match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4304precedence.
4305Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4306"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4307example).
4308
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004309IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4310
4311:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4312 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4313 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4314 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4315 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4316 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4317 given explicitly.
4318
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004319:sy[ntax] conceal
4320 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4321
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004322==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043238. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004324
4325In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4326characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4327use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4328use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4329 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4330 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4331
4332See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004333always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004334value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4335not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4336independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4337
4338Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4339This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4340
4341 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4342The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4343change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4344match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4345are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4346pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4347
4348The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4349The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4350
4351ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4352me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4353hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4354he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4355rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4356re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4357lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4358
4359The {offset} can be:
4360
4361s start of the matched pattern
4362s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4363s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4364e end of the matched pattern
4365e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4366e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004367{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004368
4369Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4370
4371Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4372meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4373
4374 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4375match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4376region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4377region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4378region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4379
4380Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4381 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4382<
4383 some "string" text
4384 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4385
4386Notes:
4387- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4388 offset(s).
4389- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4390- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4391 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004392- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004393 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004394 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004395- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4396 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4397 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4398
4399Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4400 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4401<
4402 /* this is a comment */
4403 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4404
4405A more complicated Example: >
4406 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4407<
4408 abcfoostringbarabc
4409 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004410 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004411
4412Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4413
4414Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4415with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4416in the pattern.
4417
4418The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4419be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4420cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4421characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4422used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4423specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4424
4425 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4426 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4427 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4428<
4429 ___zzzz ___wwww
4430 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4431 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4432 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4433
4434The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4435unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4436
4437
4438Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4439
4440The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4441expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4442
4443When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4444allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004445following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4446the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004447
4448The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4449continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4450matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4451halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4452previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4453is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4454 x x a
4455 b x x
4456Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4457after the "\n".
4458
4459
4460External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4461
4462These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4463
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004464 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004465 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4466 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4467 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004468
4469 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4470 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4471 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4472 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4473
4474Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4475sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4476shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4477items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4478referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4479example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4480 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4481
4482As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4483it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004484changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004485first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4486also be used in skip patterns: >
4487 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4488
4489Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4490indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4491to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4492Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4493within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4494sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4495the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4496
4497Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4498cannot be referred to.
4499
4500==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010045019. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004502
4503:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4504 [add={group-name}..]
4505 [remove={group-name}..]
4506
4507This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4508single name.
4509
4510 contains={group-name}..
4511 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4512 add={group-name}..
4513 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4514 remove={group-name}..
4515 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4516
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004517A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4518nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4519this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004520
4521Example: >
4522 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4523 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4524
4525As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4526retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4527to speak: >
4528 :syntax keyword A aaa
4529 :syntax keyword B bbb
4530 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4531 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4532 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4533
4534This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4535 :syntax keyword A aaa
4536 :syntax keyword B bbb
4537 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4538 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4539 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4540 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4541 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004542<
4543 *E848*
4544The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004545
4546==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100454710. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004548
4549It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4550a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4551two different ways:
4552
4553 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4554 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4555 the |:runtime| command: >
4556
4557 " In cpp.vim:
4558 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4559 :unlet b:current_syntax
4560
4561< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4562 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4563 ":syntax include" command:
4564
4565:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4566
4567 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4568 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4569 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4570 that list. >
4571
4572 " In perl.vim:
4573 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4574 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4575<
4576 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4577 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4578 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4579 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4580 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004581 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4582 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004583
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004584 *E847*
4585The maximum number of includes is 999.
4586
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004587==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100458811. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004589
4590Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4591make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4592redrawing starts.
4593
4594:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4595
4596There are four ways to synchronize:
45971. Always parse from the start of the file.
4598 |:syn-sync-first|
45992. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4600 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4601 |:syn-sync-second|
46023. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4603 |:syn-sync-third|
46044. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4605 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4606
4607 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4608For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4609limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4610
4611If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4612that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4613lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4614
4615If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4616for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4617adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4618slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004619 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004620<
4621 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4622When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4623cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4624start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4625the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4626break use this: >
4627 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4628The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4629change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4630value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4631
4632
4633First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4634>
4635 :syntax sync fromstart
4636
4637The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4638accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4639so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004640when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004641case: to the end of the file).
4642
4643Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4644
4645
4646Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4647
4648For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4649Example: >
4650 :syntax sync ccomment
4651
4652When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4653comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4654used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4655An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4656 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4657This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4658used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4659region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4660
4661The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4662lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4663lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4664lines, but it hard to sync on).
4665
4666Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4667that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4668is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4669chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4670is hardly ever noticed.
4671
4672
4673Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4674
4675For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4676Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4677means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4678Example: >
4679 :syntax sync minlines=50
4680
4681"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4682
4683
4684Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4685
4686The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4687sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4688region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4689starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4690the search continues backwards in the file.
4691
4692This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4693matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4694- Keywords cannot be used.
4695- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4696 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4697- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4698 forwards.
4699- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4700 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4701 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01004702 consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004703- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4704 group of continued lines).
4705- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4706 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4707 line (or group of continued lines).
4708- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4709 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4710 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4711 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4712
4713There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
47141. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4715 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4716 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4717 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
47182. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4719 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4720 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4721 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4722Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4723
4724Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4725avoid finding unwanted matches.
4726
4727[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4728search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4729highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4730faster.]
4731
4732 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4733 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4734
4735 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4736 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4737 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4738 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4739 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4740
4741 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4742 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4743
4744 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4745 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4746 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4747 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4748 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4749 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4750 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4751 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4752 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4753 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4754
4755 :syntax sync match ..
4756 :syntax sync region ..
4757
4758 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4759 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4760
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004761 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004762 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4763
4764 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4765 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4766 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4767
4768If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4769searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4770few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4771 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4772
4773You can clear all sync settings with: >
4774 :syntax sync clear
4775
4776You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4777 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4778
4779==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100478012. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004781
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004782This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004783
4784 :sy[ntax] [list]
4785
4786To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4787
4788 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4789
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004790To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004791
4792 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4793
4794See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4795
4796Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4797is mostly used, because it looks better.
4798
4799==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100480013. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004801
4802There are three types of highlight groups:
4803- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4804 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4805 linked to a group of the second type.
4806- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4807- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4808 *hitest.vim*
4809You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4810 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4811This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4812in their own color.
4813
4814 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004815:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4816 This is basically the same as >
4817 :echo g:colors_name
4818< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4819 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4820 feature it will output "unknown".
4821
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004822:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004823 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004824 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004825 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4826 "start" and then under "opt".
4827
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004828 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004829 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004830
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004831 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004832 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004833 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004834 runtime colors/evening.vim
4835 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4836
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004837< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4838 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4839 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004840 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004841 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004842 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004843
4844:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4845 attributes set.
4846
4847:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4848 List one highlight group.
4849
4850:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4851 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4852 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4853 default colors to use.
Bram Moolenaar213da552020-09-17 19:59:26 +02004854 If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004855
4856:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4857:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4858 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4859 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4860
4861:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4862 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4863 an existing group.
4864 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4865 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4866 argument.
4867
4868Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4869default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4870highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4871values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4872the default value.
4873
4874A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4875a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4876
4877 :hi Comment gui=bold
4878
4879Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4880specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4881result is like this single command has been used: >
4882 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4883<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004884 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004885When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4886also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4887 :verbose hi Comment
4888< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004889 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004890
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004891When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4892mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004893
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004894 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4895There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4896term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004897cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004898 termcap entry)
4899gui the GUI
4900
4901For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4902the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4903
49041. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4905
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004906 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4907 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004908 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004909term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4910 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4911 following items (in any order):
4912 bold
4913 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004914 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004915 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004916 reverse
4917 inverse same as reverse
4918 italic
4919 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004920 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004921 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4922
4923 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4924 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004925 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004926 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004927 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4928 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4929 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4930 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4931 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4932
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004933
4934start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4935stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4936 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4937 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4938
4939 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4940 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4941 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4942 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4943 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4944 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4945 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4946
4947 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4948
4949 1. A string with escape sequences.
4950 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4951 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4952 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4953 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4954
4955 2. A list of terminal codes.
4956 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4957 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4958 White space is not allowed. Example:
4959 start=t_C1,t_BL
4960 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4961
4962
49632. highlight arguments for color terminals
4964
4965cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4966 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4967 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4968 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4969 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004970 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4971 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4972 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004973
4974ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4975ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02004976ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
4977 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
4978 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
4979
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004980 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4981 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4982 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4983 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4984 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4985 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4986
4987 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4988 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4989 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4990 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4991 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02004992 *tmux*
4993 When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: >
4994 # tmux colors
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004995 set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color"
4996 set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc"
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02004997< More info at:
4998 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal
4999 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005000
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01005001 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
5002 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
5003 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005004 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
5005 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
5006
5007 *cterm-colors*
5008 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
5009 0 0 Black
5010 1 4 DarkBlue
5011 2 2 DarkGreen
5012 3 6 DarkCyan
5013 4 1 DarkRed
5014 5 5 DarkMagenta
5015 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
5016 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
5017 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
5018 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
5019 10 2* Green, LightGreen
5020 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
5021 12 1* Red, LightRed
5022 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
5023 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
5024 15 7* White
5025
5026 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
5027 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
5028 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
5029 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
5030 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
5031 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
5032 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
5033 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
5034 a number instead of a color name.
5035
5036 The case of the color names is ignored.
5037 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005038 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005039 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
5040
5041 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
5042 colors!
5043
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01005044 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
5045
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005046 *:hi-normal-cterm*
5047 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
5048 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
5049 Example: >
5050 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5051< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005052 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5053 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5054 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5055 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5056 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005057 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005058 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005059 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005060
5061 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5062 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5063 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5064 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005065 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5066 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5067 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5068 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5069 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005070 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5071< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005072 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005073 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5074
5075
50763. highlight arguments for the GUI
5077
5078gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5079 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5080 See |attr-list| for a description.
5081 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5082 have the same effect.
5083 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5084
5085font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5086 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5087 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5088 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5089<
5090 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5091 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5092 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5093 used).
5094 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5095 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5096 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5097 changed.
5098 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5099 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5100 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005101 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5102 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5103 Example: >
5104 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005105
5106guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5107guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005108guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5109 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005110 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5111 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005112 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005113 NONE no color (transparent)
5114 bg use normal background color
5115 background use normal background color
5116 fg use normal foreground color
5117 foreground use normal foreground color
5118 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5119 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5120 Example: >
5121 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5122<
5123 *gui-colors*
5124 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5125 Red LightRed DarkRed
5126 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5127 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5128 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5129 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5130 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5131 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5132 Black White
5133 Orange Purple Violet
5134
5135 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5136 |win32-colors|.
5137
5138 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5139 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5140 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005141 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005142 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005143 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5144 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5145<
5146 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5147These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5148'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5149of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5150command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005151 *hl-ColorColumn*
5152ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005153 *hl-Conceal*
5154Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5155 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005156 *hl-Cursor*
5157Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005158lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5159 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005160 *hl-CursorIM*
5161CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005162 *hl-CursorColumn*
5163CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5164 set
5165 *hl-CursorLine*
5166CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5167 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005168 *hl-Directory*
5169Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5170 *hl-DiffAdd*
5171DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5172 *hl-DiffChange*
5173DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5174 *hl-DiffDelete*
5175DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5176 *hl-DiffText*
5177DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005178 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005179EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5180 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005181 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5182ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5183 *hl-VertSplit*
5184VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5185 *hl-Folded*
5186Folded line used for closed folds
5187 *hl-FoldColumn*
5188FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5189 *hl-SignColumn*
5190SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5191 *hl-IncSearch*
5192IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5193 ":s///c"
5194 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005195LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005196 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005197 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5198LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5199 option is set, above the cursor line.
5200 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5201LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5202 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005203 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005204CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5205 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005206 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005207 *hl-MatchParen*
5208MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5209 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5210
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005211 *hl-ModeMsg*
5212ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5213 *hl-MoreMsg*
5214MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5215 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005216NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5217 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5218 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5219 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005220 *hl-Normal*
5221Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005222 *hl-Pmenu*
5223Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5224 *hl-PmenuSel*
5225PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5226 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5227PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5228 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5229PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005230 *hl-Question*
5231Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005232 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5233QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005234 *hl-Search*
5235Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005236 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005237 *hl-SpecialKey*
5238SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5239 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5240 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5241 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005242 *hl-SpellBad*
5243SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5244 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005245 *hl-SpellCap*
5246SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5247 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005248 *hl-SpellLocal*
5249SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5250 used in another region. |spell|
5251 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5252 *hl-SpellRare*
5253SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5254 hardly ever used. |spell|
5255 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005256 *hl-StatusLine*
5257StatusLine status line of current window
5258 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5259StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5260 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5261 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005262 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5263StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5264 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5265StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5266 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005267 *hl-TabLine*
5268TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5269 *hl-TabLineFill*
5270TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5271 *hl-TabLineSel*
5272TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005273 *hl-Terminal*
5274Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005275 *hl-Title*
5276Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5277 *hl-Visual*
5278Visual Visual mode selection
5279 *hl-VisualNOS*
5280VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5281 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5282 *hl-WarningMsg*
5283WarningMsg warning messages
5284 *hl-WildMenu*
5285WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5286
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005287 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005288The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005289statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005290
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005291For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005292scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5293Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5294and guifg.
5295
5296 *hl-Menu*
5297Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5298 Also used for the toolbar.
5299 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5300
5301 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5302 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5303 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5304 set.
5305
5306 *hl-Scrollbar*
5307Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5308 scrollbars.
5309 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5310
5311 *hl-Tooltip*
5312Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5313 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5314
5315 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5316 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5317 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5318 set.
5319
5320==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100532114. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005322
5323When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5324can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5325group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5326
5327To set a link:
5328
5329 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5330
5331To remove a link:
5332
5333 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5334
5335Notes: *E414*
5336- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5337 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5338- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5339 removed.
5340- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5341 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5342 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5343 links for groups that already have settings.
5344
5345 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5346The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5347group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5348will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5349
5350Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5351specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5352 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5353If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5354 :highlight link cComment Question
5355Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5356overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5357
Bram Moolenaar23515b42020-11-29 14:36:24 +01005358To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have
5359highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting
5360another color scheme, put a command like this in the
5361"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: >
5362 highlight! default link cComment Question
5363
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005364==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100536515. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005366
5367If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5368command: >
5369 :syntax clear
5370
5371This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5372or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5373in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5374load the syntax file.
5375The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5376loaded after this command.
5377
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005378To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5379 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5380This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5381
5382To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5383 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5384This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5385
5386 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005387If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5388the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5389 :syntax off
5390
5391What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5392 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5393See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5394$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5395
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005396 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5397If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5398defaults back: >
5399
5400 :syntax reset
5401
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005402It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5403affects the highlighting.
5404
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005405This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5406
5407Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5408back to their Vim default.
5409Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5410scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5411
5412What this actually does is: >
5413
5414 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5415 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5416
5417Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5418
5419 *syncolor*
5420If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5421script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5422'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5423the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5424reset" command.
5425
5426For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5427
5428 if &background == "light"
5429 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5430 else
5431 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5432 endif
5433
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005434 *E679*
5435Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5436'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5437endless loop.
5438
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005439Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5440your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5441depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5442
5443 *syntax_cmd*
5444The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5445syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5446 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5447 links are kept
5448 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5449 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5450 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5451 the colors.
5452 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5453 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5454 them.
5455
5456==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100545716. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005458
5459If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5460mappings.
5461
5462 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5463 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5464>
5465 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5466 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5467
5468WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5469memory Vim will consume.
5470
5471Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5472must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5473
5474Put these lines in your Makefile:
5475
5476# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5477types: types.vim
5478types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005479 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005480 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5481 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5482
5483And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5484
5485 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5486 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5487 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5488 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5489 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5490
5491==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100549217. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005493
5494Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5495possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5496private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5497with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5498highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5499italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5500
5501To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5502windows on the buffer: >
5503 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005504< *w:current_syntax*
5505This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5506"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5507restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5508"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5509"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005510Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005511
5512Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005513on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005514syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005515same buffer.
5516
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005517A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5518is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5519When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005520
5521==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100552218. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005523
5524Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5525default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5526 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5527 : if has("terminfo")
5528 : set t_Co=8
5529 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5530 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5531 : else
5532 : set t_Co=8
5533 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5534 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5535 : endif
5536 :endif
5537< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5538
5539You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5540e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5541
5542Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5543be wrong.
5544 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5545The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5546But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5547 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5548 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5549<
5550 *colortest.vim*
5551To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005552To use it, execute this command: >
5553 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005554
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005555Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005556output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5557at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5558colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5559
5560 *xfree-xterm*
5561To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005562included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005563at: >
5564 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5565Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5566termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5567supports. >
5568 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5569If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5570(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5571
5572This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5573 :if has("terminfo")
5574 : set t_Co=16
5575 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5576 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5577 :else
5578 : set t_Co=16
5579 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5580 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5581 :endif
5582< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5583
5584Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5585translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5586Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5587
5588For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5589
5590 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5591 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5592
5593Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5594and try if that works.
5595
5596You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5597 XTerm*color0: #000000
5598 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5599 XTerm*color2: #008000
5600 XTerm*color3: #808000
5601 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5602 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5603 XTerm*color6: #008080
5604 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5605 XTerm*color8: #808080
5606 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5607 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5608 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5609 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5610 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5611 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5612 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5613 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5614
5615[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5616cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005617newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005618
5619To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5620Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5621 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5622<
5623 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5624To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5625Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5626these resources:
5627 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5628 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5629 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5630 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5631
5632 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005633These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005634foreground colors: >
5635 :if has("terminfo")
5636 : set t_Co=8
5637 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5638 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5639 :else
5640 : set t_Co=8
5641 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5642 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5643 :endif
5644< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5645
5646 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5647These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5648emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5649bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5650 :set t_Co=16
5651 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5652 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5653<
5654 *TTpro-telnet*
5655These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5656open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5657 set t_Co=16
5658 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5659 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5660Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5661that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5662(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5663
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005664
5665==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100566619. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005667
5668This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5669
5670If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5671faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5672as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5673
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005674Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5675You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5676
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005677To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5678sequence: >
5679 :syntime on
5680 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5681 :syntime report
5682
5683This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5684it took to match them against the text.
5685
5686:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5687 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5688 matching.
5689
5690:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5691
5692:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5693
5694:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5695 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5696 the output.
5697
5698 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5699 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5700 matching this pattern.
5701 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5702 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5703 matched
5704 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5705 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5706 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5707 this is not unique.
5708 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5709
5710Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5711include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5712pattern does NOT match.
5713
5714When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5715all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5716literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5717
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005718"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005719 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005720"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005721
5722
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005723 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: